Home

2007 Jeep Wrangler

1. Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 214 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 231 List Button Clock Setting Procedure 231 ese ES LEU a detipionsttonqa 217 Miatellite Radio If Equipped 233 eee For MP3 WMA Play 217 System Activation llle 233 E Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD NENNEN Mcd MS Player MP3 Aux Jack lesse 219 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 219 Selecting Satellite Mode RSC Radios 234 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And Satellite Antenna 0000050 234 MP3 Audio Play 00 0000 e ee 224 Reception Quality 000 234 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 227 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 234 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 229 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 229 Equipped i a ts ee ond 4 Dev iat ee 237 Wiss Code RER AM PM CD DVD Radio Wim Pee tions Weinen Navigation System If Equipped 231 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 237 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 237 M E c B Climate Controls oss dios m 238 OPERAS TIUS sans nce ran a eh oC du Manual Heater Only 004 238
2. defined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Ralistous Music Ral Wise Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be mom Talk Rel Talk exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Rock Rock SETUP Button Soft Soft Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rock Soft Rck the following items Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow A Sports Sports user to set the clock Turn TUNE control knob to adjust Talk Talk the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob Top 40 Top 40 to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob Weather Weather again to save changes AM and FM Buttons B ing the SEEK b hen th ic T i y pressing tne s RHOD AER UE NIU Type icon Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory Music Type function only operates when in the FM When you are recei
3. Rear Cargo Lamp 4 Door Only 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light Multi Function Control Lever The multi function control lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals Multi Function Control Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and Headlights Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Switch To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multi function control lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will flash and a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is op
4. To Disarm The System Bl Illuminated Entry ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Using The Panic Alarm 0 22 Wind Butfetin ssec e eel 34 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 22 W Rear Swing Gate ioo cose m en 34 Programming Additional Transmitters 23 W Occupant Restraints 0000 36 General Information lesen 24 Lap Shoulder Belts sars resspan t nams taisa 37 Battery Replacement o n a naana aaan 25 Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt E NOME 25 R AE ScsnctmdstRupuafta nena ento T fxs dntcaxcccunonced 26 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 43 Reat Dot Removal G Door Modd ausu nv 27 Seat Belt Pretensioners 04 43 e MICE pou uc Manual Door Locks llle 30 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 45 Poner Deon LOGRO 1E EPPEN sesane tenes al Seat Belt Extender os cocer pasee pan aai 46 B Windows 22 349 9 ER RE xS 32 Driver And on aaea Supplemental Power Windows If Equipped 32 Restraint Systems SRS 0 0 46 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Child Restraint ese h
5. Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology Engine Oil API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil is recommended Meets the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compart ment Oil Filter 3 8L Engine Mopar Oil Filter P N 04105409AC Fuel Selection 87 Octane ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the require ments of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Axle Differential Front Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 198 RBI Model 35 and 226 RBI Model 44 Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubri cant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use Mopar Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended b
6. Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION mcm Weight Distributing Hitch System ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 EXAMPLE ONLY Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 8184t96f Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Due II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg u Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Heavy Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GTW Max To
7. 2 00 20 eee eee 430 Setting the Clock sein Gave Rr es 205 220 231 Shift Lock Manual Override 259 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 257 Shitting b eR ex Cae a YU ae Ae se REUS 258 Automatic Transmission sn 261 Manual Transmission ss 255 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 43 Shoulder Belts ues Rr ara RR Rs 37 Side Airbag obriera lese 57 Signals Turn 6 ee 98 191 395 396 Snow Chains Tire Chains 300 SO t TOP xem e bere tay neat E ex 130 145 Spare Mite 3 uas diea awa EN aa Pd e d Ede 339 Spark Plugs 52e eee ee onpa d ger ces 358 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 1 uie ec ERR eg 306 Chl aa aae e ea ce ee ate eee eee 356 Speed Control Cruise Control 102 Speedometer nick lr vise dene dele ed ws 190 en INDEX 447 tAE ee eed apse gS dears ay nll ov Aran aie ani anaes 251 Automatic Transmission 251 Cold Weather 0 0000 cee eee ene 252 Engine Block Heater 00 254 Engine Fails to Start 0004 252 Manual Transmission 251 Steering Power cos i oe ee Rae Pa ren we a RR 283 363 Tilt Column i20 okay oe ERR Iv 101 Wheel Lock 22d e RIESGO 15 Wheel Tilt i22 Y RR bx ERG 101 Storage ous ldueb edm Fus dep mesa gat 116 393 Storage Behind the Seat liess 117 Storage Vehicle i c ier 245 393 Storing Your Vehicle sses s prentsa ti
8. 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 1 Air Outlet 4 Radio 7 Power Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 5 Glove Box 8 Lower Switch Bank 3 Horn 6 Climate Controls 9 Auxiliary Power Outlet 81858640 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81918b50 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION Your vehicle is equipped with the instrument cluster described on the following pages 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank When the fuel gauge pointer initially moves to E for your safety approximately 2 U S Gallons 7 6L of fuel remain NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel gauge voltmeter oil pressure and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on for three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light comes back on immediately or comes on while driving it means that there is a problem with the charging system or the battery is low Also a chime will sound if the light comes back on See your authorized dealer immediately 3 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog l
9. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING that the shift lever should fail to move from Park with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed To It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P operate the shift lock manual override perform the Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher following steps than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the 1 Firmly set the parking brake brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift shift lock manual override cover which is located on the into gear when the engine is idling normally and PRNDL bezel in front of the P Park graphic when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal m 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the service brake pedal Shift Lock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override 5 Depress the shifter release button and shift into N opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Neutral 6 The vehicle may then be started in N Neutral Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used Brake Transmission Interlock System This system preve
10. 398 Fog Light Service a iux es Gee ake es 396 bog lights sxc bod seeks 9e px ea mes 98 396 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 00 88 Folding Rear Seat 1 2 6 ee eee 91 Folding Windshield 04 176 Four Wheel Drive vsum E AG a was 265 SHAMS iss eese e e 3 E pra 267 Four Wheel Drive Operation 265 Four Way Hazard Flasher 336 Front Axle Differential lessen 378 puel ejecta m ER t M baie a ERES ES 306 Filler Cap Gas Cap rere nirst iran arkat as 310 Filter arere ede ede bak RP REP Eds 360 Gasoline 12 eine eeu sea ooh dee Aes EN 306 Gauge eissaia hoe ke aie 3x e eb neg es 190 Materials Added 2 005 308 Octane Rating Requirements us ee gh als ena ese 397 Tank Capacity 4254452 e er PS 397 Fuel System Caution 0 308 311 312 lg P ye ais aioe Ge ie Bia a a we what A A 385 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 310 351 Gasoline Fuel 0 0 2 0 eee eee eee 306 Gasoline Reformulated 307 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 307 Gauges Coolant Temperature 00000 Buel era care ae oie hee FR OSS RN dla Odometer 242006 crece goatee v eie Speedometer una duke erp RC aos ee Tachometer oii eked kde e rk meis Gear Ranges ee memas ayaa DR e a General Information 0 00 Glass Cleaning s kk deed soc dora Gross Axle Weight Rating 440 INDEX aa Gros
11. llle 176 Windshield Washers 00004 99 365 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 381 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
12. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Mitrors 229 RRE RR ages tamed 83 Inside Day Night Mirror 83 Outside Mirrors llle 84 seats oe sds Se es EE EEE T See 85 Front Seat Adjustment 04 85 Manual Seat Height Adjustment f Equipped sse crer essre enekes titiara 86 Front Seat Back Recline 05 86 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat 2 Door Models orgaren cea cee NEREA 87 Head Restraints 6 2 ee eee n ne 87 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 2 Door Models 88 Removing The Rear Seat 2 Door Models 89 Replacing The Rear Seat 2 Door Models 91 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat 4 Door Models 0 00000200 91 To Raise The Rear Seat llus 93 Bl To Open And Close The Hood 93 I5 os eh esas DT 94 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Interior Lights 24e eder pma 94 Windshield Washers 04 4 100 Multi Function Control Lever 96 Mist Eeature sa cie sede ce ee ats 100 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights And H Tilt Steering Column 0 000 0 101 n MM E id ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 102 E So ideo dotes ah bal d To Activate ci
13. 04 374 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission 00 376 Manual Transmission less 376 Transfer Case ss treer sca ER ER RR ale 377 Front Rear Axle Fluid 378 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion 000s eee eee 379 H Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module 385 Ba Vehicle Storage ursus zou y uw sea es 393 ll Replacement Bulbs If Equipped 393 W Bulb Replacement esee 394 Head Light cese me tete y quer ice 394 Front Park Turn Signal sess 395 Front Side Marker 00005 395 Front Fog Light cree my 396 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Lights 396 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 397 Engine dw ede ERE dua FER Es 398 H Fluid Capacities 0 0000 397 CASSIS sete acts teas dens athe Anat EE a a 399 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 398 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE AUTOMATIC BATTERY TRANSMISSION ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FILL DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER COOLANT AIR CLEANER COOLANT WASHER STEERING FLUID PRESSURE CAP FILTER BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 8191f0ee ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehic
14. 18 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the um rear soft top bow and then completely tuck the sail panel 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the into the bodyside retainer window 16 Finish installing the sail panels 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 19 Open the doors and tuck the plastic retainers into the door frame slots above the door opening Start at the front and work toward the rear of the vehicle 81926670 81926539 o 20 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 SOFT TOP 4 DOOR MODELS If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is are a natural contraction e The soft top is not designed to carry any addi BEIBVIRY poate Ome SQ OHC OD E tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top ing hunting or camping supplies and or lug fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and gage etc Also it was not designed as a structural the top can then be snapped into place If temperature is member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down carry any additional loads other than environmen or roll the
15. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un defined Wong Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B 208 UNDERSTAND
16. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Switch MULTIFTCN SW Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Heater Ventilation Red Controller Occupant Air Conditioning Classification Module Automatic Tempera ORC OCM ture Control HVAC M17 15 Amp Left Tail License ATC Rear View Blue Park Lamp LT TAIL ii i VW MIR LIC PRK LMP abin Compartment Node CCN Transfer wig P amp de po M Case Switch T CASE id al a PRK RUN LMP SW RUN ST Multi Function Control M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Natural ASD 1 and 2 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL Blue Node Interior Light Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift CCN INT LIGHT Pump DSL LIFT Switch Bank SW PUMP Export BANK Steering Con Only trol Module SCM M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Red PWR MIRR SW Yellow ASD 3 Driver Window M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT Switch DRVR WIND Red HORN HI LOW SW M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch IGN Red HI LOW Red SW
17. iliis 200 Console 53s s deba Uva eed eee a a os 116 Console Floor llle 116 Contract Service llle 428 Converter Catalytic llle 358 Cooling System idu ee ger yw PEs a ee ede 366 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 368 Coolant Capacity 4 sis eel s E ead s 397 Coolant Level llle 370 Disposal of Used Coolant 369 Drain Flush and Refill 367 Inspection 45 4 dnd Rm bade e ep E aon 366 Points to Remember sess 370 Pressure Cap ise x e we cide eres 369 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 367 397 Temperature Gauge 0 00000005 193 Corrosion Protection llle 379 Crankcase Emission Control System 360 Cruise Light ocres cess sense e doiit 193 Cup Holder cus icesesed perd ER SER 115 Customer Assistance llle 426 Data Recorder Event 0 0 000 e eee 61 Daytime Running Lights 99 Dealer Service riostar erari ee eee 354 Defroster Rear Window s 184 Defroster Windshield 239 241 Delay Intermittent Wipers 0 0 99 Diagnostic System Onboard 351 Dimmer Switch Headlight 97 en INDEX 437 Dipsticks Oil Engine edere RE SX CR ERR Ga 354 Disabled Vehicle Towing lessen 345 Disarming Theft System 20 19 Disposal Engine Ol ies ee Re ee REY 357
18. warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched level isat or below the ADD or MIN mark ule B M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 e Check the windshield washer solvent add as required 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter d 3 amage Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals Inspect brake hoses as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Check the coolant level hoses and clamps master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e After completion of off road operation the underside of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected Exam e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct ine threaded fasteners for looseness operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 nn SCHEDULE B 405 Schedule B Follow this schedule if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Excessive engine idling
19. 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME number will be displayed The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode RSC Radios Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK button
20. CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and
21. Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un
22. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position 10 Remove connector from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking tab to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn clockwise Front Park Turn Signal 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Side Marker 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counter clockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Fog Light 1 Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia and disconnect the electrical connector from underneath 2 Turn the bulb 1 4 turn counter clockwise CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the b
23. eee ee 297 Radio Broadcast Signals 0 203 Radio Navigation llle 231 Radio Operation 00 237 Radio Satellite lesen 231 233 Rear Axle Differential lessen 378 Rear Swing Gate s e e ea eee 34 Rear Window Defroster 004 184 Rear Window Features 004 182 Rear Wiper Washer eese 182 Rearview Mirrors 0 0 00 cece eee 83 Recorder Event Data 0000000008 61 nn INDEX 445 Recreational Towing llle 332 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 332 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 333 Reformulated Gasoline 0040 307 Rehrigerant se bias URP doa 363 Release H d 4 2 2s e Reed 93 Reminder Lights On 000 97 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 0 0 00 0c eee 44 Remote Control Door bEock e rr ee RR ens 20 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Replacement Bulbs ieis neinet an aa e a 393 Replacement Parts vre 2 00 sere ee PES eee oa 353 Replacement Tir s i uae adhere aer ess 299 Reporting Safety Defects 00 429 Restraint Head cee ee ee 87 Restraints Child zzz eek ee 63 67 Restraints Occupant 0 0 0 6 36 Rotation Tires llle 301 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 77 Safety Defects Reporting 4
24. 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight protect you properly The lap portion could ride too tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt s ys Packie yee a the Buckle ness sa reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision A belt that is loose will not protect you as well In a NOTE The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on sudden stop you could move too far forward increas until the driver s seat belt is buckled ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together
25. Soundbar Dome Light 912 Bulbs only available from authorized dealer Instrument Cluster Bulb Type Telltale High Beam llle esses 74 Illumination sllseeeee ee 103 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lights 2 0000200000 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light 1 L E D FOS Lights centina ntaa hal shen arty aet asd ates 9145 Front Park Turn Lights 2 3157 Front Side Marker Lights 2 168 Headlights 2 0000000 H13 Stop Tail Turn Lights 2 0 3157 Underhood Light seecae neare iii e iae ena 561 License Tight e arya kk eee es 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT Head Light 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counter clockwise 8 Pull the bulb from the housing
26. Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 306 STARTING AND OPERATING e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States cesses KR5S120123 Ca ada ues baa eed Gale eo Bas 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800diab an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However conti
27. Used Coolant Antifreeze 369 Door Locks 4 3 us daa e o hates VERS 29 30 DOOIS 2e ex Gen Ra UR EO RA 25 Drive Belts 2 2 Iia ERGO Pe REG 358 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 0 0005 86 IDTAVING ce ette ise ea ati p RR CAT ede 273 OffPavement 00 000 ENE keen r EN 274 Of RO ad 2uu d tst Sve a alee Phe KR ale dos 274 Dual lop ho bad ediaeuiean te 118 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 114 Electrical Power Outlets lille 114 Electronic Brake Control System 105 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 102 Electronic Stability Program ESP 108 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 197 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 197 Emergency Brake sauia sereia aaa i a 279 Emergency In Case of Brake Warning Light 191 Coolant Temperature Gauge 193 Hazard Warning Flasher 336 Jacking oasis et HERE oo o E eee 338 Jump Starting iei seca ic piesa b dg 342 TOW HOOKS au oo et otesi nssr Rex es 344 Emission Control System Maintenance 352 402 Engine Air Cleaner sz gs ei PELA si ea hies Block Heater xe eerie aea ette ene Break In Recommendations Compartment 6c anh ee dde oh ean deals Compartment Identification 438 INDEX a Exhaust Gas Caution 000005 76 309 Fails to Stat a2 o dd fe Saved xox Po ERU 252 Flooded Starting ery sass strs serasa iis 2
28. 15 the values will wrap around to Zone 1 When the correct zone is displayed per the Zone map for the zone that the vehicle is located in wait for about 5 seconds then the trip computer will store the variance value in memory and the compass will resume normal operation NOTE The US Metric display will change from En glish to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR symbol appears however it will revert back to its original setting after programming the compass func tions COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8040bf97 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Outside Temperature If the outside temperature is more than 131 F 55 C the display will show 131 F 55 C When the outside tem perature is less than 40 F 40 C the display will show 40 F 40 C RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of
29. 429 Safety Information Tire 0 284 Safety Tips iss isa ach ket dra beste doa oe 76 Satellite Radio llle 231 233 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 05 234 Schedule Maintenance less 402 Seat Belt Reminder sees 44 Seat Bells 40 lise ke eb G EP amer gis 37 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 43 And Pregnant Women 0000 45 Child Restraint ieee s serdes eetere eee 63 73 Extender 62 darn d doses EE E WE Tris 46 Front Seat ad panis aa 944a gp Ra pri E 37 Maintenance usuram sc OR RUE ROLE EUR 383 Pretensioners llle 43 Reminder llle 191 Seats 446 INDEX aa Adjustment fo sid da x eb ree orae io 85 Cleaning 4ereex 30 PERRA EX RC ER PARS 381 Easy ENY ss ok dXX RR E SES 87 Fold and Tumble Rear 88 Head Restraints llle 87 Height Adjustment 0 00000 86 Rear Folding screen igh eae 91 Removal Seaan riaa neama a db RYE YA 89 91 Seatback Release 0002 eee 86 TMS aceite ad eon ied son taed ea 86 Security Against Theft 00 0 19 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection of OIl 12s RR RR RES 356 Sentry Key Immobilizer 16 Sentry Key Programming sess 18 Sentry Key Replacement 17 Service Assistance 00 cee eee eee eee 426 Service Contract xk ed Wh bik ees EUER 428 Service Manuals
30. Brake System s seeur s iui dria n iii EN EA 372 Anti Lock ABS lille 105 281 HOSES rcc 372 Master Cylinder i41 e EE RES 373 Parking anc etes mu ettet ensi e PR Rd 279 Warning Light ssseeess 191 Brake Transmission Interlock 260 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 75 Bulb Replacement seire sare ee ere 393 394 Capacities Fluid iau ese beg nie Mame siete Hohe 397 Caps Filler Fuel TC 310 Power Steering sosa neau rinta ae AE aa 363 Car Washes co csse e e Rr 380 Carbon Monoxide Warning 309 Cargo Light sss e rere ES ales du 95 Catalytic Converter 358 Caution Exhaust Gas llle 76 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 237 Cellular Phone se Rn 237 Center High Mounted Stop Light 397 Certification Label ties ines veda besiis iers 313 Chains Tite inca bas dere Ge ees Dare ee dee ace 300 Changing A Plat Tite iiic ets 338 Charging System Light op essensie pacanie 190 Chart Dre Sizing se s caes auem Eee ge es 285 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 436 INDEX a Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 000000 63 70 73 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 68 70 Child Sat aes sein eh ceo a a IRSE E RR 67 Climate Control nue eh eae ce eee a3 238 Clocks o kis dei ea ne be HUE E 205 220 231 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 237 COMPASS mad esee bSDqeETA Edo 198 Compass Calibration
31. If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing t
32. If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box
33. In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones
34. Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving LIGHTS Interior Lights The overhead light comes on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function control lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Cargo Lamp Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or if equipped when the Un lock button is pressed on the key fob Also the rear cargo lamp may be operated by pressing the lens to turn it on Press the lens again to shut it off 81913177 Cargo Lamp When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery
35. Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed im mediately Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid 1 Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid Flui
36. a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions e Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result e Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak 7 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering e Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Win dows WASHING Use Mopar Car Wash or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support top from underneath RINSING Be sure to remove all trace of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these dire
37. cold parked for more than 3 hours air pressure of 35 psi ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 65 F 18 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a mat
38. disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flashers 336 Preparations For Jacking 339 B If Your Engine Overheats 337 Jacking Instructions 004 B Jacking And Tire Changing 338 BJump Starting iier diana ta RE RE Jack Location sestas re pis eS 338 Mi Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Spare Tire Stowage 0000 339 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the button on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To turn the warning flashers off press the button again Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 IF YOUR
39. 192 Airbag Maintenance idarra rad adsan 60 Airbag Side sss Xue rs eem ek me 57 Alarm Security Alarm 05 19 Alignment and Balance Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio lun 234 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 0 397 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 105 281 Anti Lock Warning Light llus 192 Appearance Care s sares hien ia DRENE eee 379 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 19 Auto Down Power Windows sss 32 Automatic Transmission lesen 374 Fluid and Filter Changes 374 Fluid Level Check 0 0600 cee eee en 374 Plaid Type a ac eget ecce hk a n 374 Gear Ranges 4229 ee esae kesese meses 261 SHUN x dese eue Rene ane Re deri enn 261 Special Additives 0 0000 376 Torque Converter 0 0 0 cee eee eee 264 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 114 Auxiliary Power Outlet llle 114 Axle Lock s 22 022 ceke RR RR 270271 en INDEX 435 Battery M MP 361 Emergency Starting 4s eds betwee bas 342 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Dive sag 2 cite 408 pt hae aa EG ae E 358 Belts Seat ios esac oer dows BOR le as ee a 37 Body Mechanism Lubrication 364 Brake Assist System 6 0 0 0 e eee eee 106 Brake Assist Warning Light 196 Brake Control System Electronic 105
40. 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward Removing the Rear Seat 2 Door Models WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Folding Rear S at using a seat belt properly In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and floor attachments Always be sure that the seats firmly lock seat into position are fully latched 3 When completed return seat to it s normal position 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 1 Remove the rear subwoofer if equipped mounting 4 Press down on release bar on each side and pull seat screws 3 using a 130 Torx head driver out and away from lower bracket 5 Remove seat from the vehicle 114387 Subwoofer 2 Unplug electrical connector from rear subwoofer if equipped 3 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under Fold and Tumble Rear Seat in this section Release Bar Location ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Replacing the Rear Seat 2 Door Models Reverse steps for removing the seat WARNING e To hel
41. 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not
42. 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously replaced Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not done at 60 000 miles 96 000 km Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped nn SCHEDULE B 413 H Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 i Kilometers 174 000 179 000 183 000 188 000 193 000 n Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not replaced X X X X X N at 3 months A Rotate the tires X X X i Inspect the engine air filter element replace if necessary X E Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X S Inspect the brake linings X X C Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X B Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X D Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid Replace main X U sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped E Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X S quired if belt was previously replaced 8 Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not X replaced at 102 000 miles 164 000 km Clean a
43. 426 Be Reasonable With Requests 426 B f You Need Assistance 00 00 426 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 429 Mopar Paris esse oce eno ODE Y RR AC 429 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 00 429 In Canada haat aces E oaiae uva xa 429 Bl Publication Order Forms 430 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades iiis 431 Treadwear eee Traction Grades Temperature Grades 426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge
44. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Ra
45. Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions ie tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be
46. Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 SCHEDULE A MSE reviously replaced Miles 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 135 000 145 000 154 000 164 000 Months 84 90 96 102 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if necessary X Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Replace the spark plugs X Replace the ignition cables X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if X X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not done at X 60 months Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X Inspect the transfer case fluid add as necessary X Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X en SCHEDULE A 421 Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 126 000 Kilometers 174 000 183 000 193 000 203 000 Months 108 114 120 126 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X essary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as need
47. ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e Incity traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service
48. Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button CD MODE Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 e Maximum numb
49. Indicator Light an amber light located in the lower switch bank tells E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 the driver and front passenger when the front passen ger airbag is turned off The PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right front pas senger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD Indicator Light is not illumi nated Indicator Light Location The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when teenagers most children in a forward facing child restraint or booster seats most children that can properly wear the vehicle s seat belt and when an 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For almost all properly installed rear facing child re straints the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even th
50. ME 3 8L 4 10 4 Door 7 944 lbs 3 603 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 587 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Sahara square meters kg Model AWD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door 7 965 lbs 3 613 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1587 350 Ibs 159 kg Manual Rubicon square meters kg Model AWD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door 7 990 Ibs 3 624 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1587 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Rubicon square meters kg Model AWD Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer STARTING AND OPERATING 325 e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment p
51. Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 Kilometers 77 000 82 000 87 000 92 000 97 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not replaced X X X X X at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if necessary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect manual transmission fluid add as necessary PK lt lt lt lt gt lt OX Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid Replace main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped t Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re quired if belt was previously Drain and refill the transfer case fluid Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 gt x lt gt x lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 410 SCHEDULE B ME Miles 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 75 000 Kilometers 101 000 106 000 111 000 116 000 121 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the br
52. OPERATING Se WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days es STARTING AND OPERATING 255 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 6 Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob Manual Shift Controls NOTE The backup lights will come on when your vehicle is in R Reverse gear and the ignition is in the ON position 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Do not operate at sustained h
53. PANEL 213 Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast
54. PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE HOS HOME OS ww e 4 e od C 4 a E Uv FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM D e Ns CS r5 v 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE Toa N ER e Ult poU VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON ig d a CO 2 DAN wy oy LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON SRS NX 3 on AIRBAG Pa pun agilis MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 81916970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO e en INTRODUCTION 9 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS a
55. Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield Then clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 door frame Position the rear of the front door frame to 7 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and lay on top of the front of the rear door frame then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side 6 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the b pillar 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lo
56. Press damaging the heating elements this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the optional electric remote con trol heated mirrors An amber x light shows that the defroster 81917942 19 OD The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 188 Wi Instrument Cluster 0 0 000 189 B Instrument Cluster Description 190 lll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 198 Control Buttons 00 00 0000 6 198 Trip Conditions see eet rag hte 199 Compass Temperature Display 200 Bl Radio General Information 208 Radio Broadcast Signals 203 Two Types Of Signals Electrical Disturbances AM Reception FM Reception ss ERE RS ses 204 lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AuxJack lesse 204 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 204 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 212 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss
57. Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your WARNING abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision sible and keep it snug and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor WARNING Lock Out This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever The rear center lap sh
58. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeatedly for three minutes If disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors igni tion after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the Sentry Key S
59. Stability Program ESP Warning LightlBrake Assist System BAS Warning Light The ESP BAS warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS warning light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 for more information 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control System If a prob lem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the P Park position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when
60. Stow all loose items securely before driving ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect TRAILER TOWING on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way In this section you will find safety tips and information the brakes operate on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and CAUTION safely as possible Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If and recommendations in this manual concerning ve you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can hicles used for trailer towing 5 change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in
61. Velcro Start 3 bow to bring the retainers into place and zip the zipper only about 1 inch 2 5 cm At this time it is necessary to tuck in the door frame retainer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 9 Tuck the front retainer into the door frame slot Ensure 10 Continue zipping the window to the upper rear that the retainer is fully rolled around and properly corner positioned into the door frame Failure to do so will result in possible damage along with wind and water leaks 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 11 Tuck the bottom retainer of the quarter window into the bottom retainer beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish zipping the window and attach the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the other side 12 If the sail panel is fully installed partially uninstall the sail panel near the swing gate opening so that the zipper can be accessed 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window with the bulky seal away from you ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 17 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the at the lower left corner of the rear window opening swing gate brackets Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage
62. WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured be cause the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during infla tion Do not store or place items under the front seats You may damage the airbag wiring harnesses The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe
63. Window Module M24 25 Amp _ Rear Wiper REAR IN MOD Natural WIPER M28 10 Amp Next Generation Con Red troller NGC Trans mission Feed TRANS FEED J1962 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M29 10 Amp Occupant Classifica M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK Red tion Module OCM Red ASST Heater Venti M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module lation Air Condition Blue RR WIPER MOD ing Module HVAC Power Folding Mirror MOD Headlamp PWR FOLD MIR Wash HDLP WASH M31 20 Amp Back Up Lamps B U Compass COMPAS Yellow LAMPS M35 10Amp Heated Mirrors M32 10 Amp _ Occupant Restraint Red Red Controller ORC TT M36 20 Amp LIGHTER OR PWR EUROPE Yellow OUTLET Underhood M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con Lamp UH LAMP Red troller NGC Global Powertrain Engine Controller GPEC 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION Fuse Fuse M37 10 Amp_ Anti Lock Brake Sys e When installing the Integrated Power Module Red tem ABS Electronic cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Stability Program erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so ESP Stop Lamp may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Switch STP LP SW Module and possibly result in a electrical system Fuel Pump Rly Hi failure Control TERE M
64. behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument pan
65. by gently spraying water from a ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of antifreeze coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the antifreeze coolant will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill At the intervals shown in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Discard old antifreeze coolant solution according to rec ommended procedure Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct antifreeze coolant type 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VE
66. cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the cus tomer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displaye
67. ce sein ee ree RC PE eA 115 Folding Down The Soft Top 131 a Storage osse E S tenei iie ere oE Eni 116 Putting Up The Soft Top 4x Ex es 138 Console Storage Compartment 116 W Soft Top 4 Door Models 145 Rear Storage Compartment 117 Folding Down The Soft Top 146 li Dual Top If Equipped osos 118 Putting Up The Soft Top 155 Removing The Soft Top 0 118 W Sunrider 4 Door Models 163 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Mi Door Frame 0 2 ee ee 167 Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 00 180 Door Frame Removal 2 Door Models 167 Door Frame Installation 2 Door Models 169 M eae Window Peatanes MAA Top OYE sg ne Door Frame Removal 4 Door Models 170 Rear Window Wiper Washer TE EQUADOS sa ite Door Frame Installation 4 Door Models 173 Reg Window Demoster JE Edupedirs ta EM H Folding Windshield 176 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars lssu 177 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Inside Day Nig
68. cece 75 Tread Wear Indicators 00000 298 Trip Computer x ie Ese yw PEs eme tas 198 Trip Odometer i3 der whale erede 195 Trip Odometer Reset Button 193 Tum Signals 5s caren at oa tims 98 191 395 396 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 431 Upholstery Care RR RES 382 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 0 371 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 9 Vehicle Loading i esee eR EY E SS 290 313 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage oc cerros sssri isss isss 245 393 Viscosity Engine Oil 2 2 llle 357 Warning Flasher Hazard 336 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 190 Warnings and Cautions o sere megi is acies apia 9 Warranty Information ce eo ae e acei n ni a 429 Washer Adding Fluid 04 183 Washers Windshield less 365 Waxing and Polishing 0 380 Wheel Alignment and Balance 300 Wheel and Wheel Trim 04 381 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 381 Wheel Mounting 450 INDEX aaa Wind B ffeting sas susc Reihe Rete ies 34 PUI ME E E TTT 365 Window Fogging 542249 ek Rer RE 244 Windshield Wiper Blades 365 Windows sss de eee ERE es gg 32 Windshield Wipers llle 99 LOWE ciis eie x adeb er Or ded e Fg oa 92 Wiper Rear s ces dk a rud ede qu ace e 182 Windshield Folding
69. center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment Refer to Storage in Section 3 of this manual Jack Storage ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 Spare Tire Stowage To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking Park on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place automatic transmission in P Park or manual transmission in R Reverse Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel N BLOCKA e Passengers s
70. channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 Guide CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation 238 UNDERS
71. frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the small child category If your vehicle is so equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
72. jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft lbs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove jack assembly and wheel blocks 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immedi ately with large quantities of water hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away JUMP STARTING from the vent holes If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Do not use a booster battery or any
73. key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key System serviced bring all vehicle keys to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Security Alarm System Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Security Alarm System Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed Repeat this process to program up to a total of 8 keys General Information The Sentry Key Immobilizer System complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
74. knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues are played at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare
75. mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Use first gear and 4L Low for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to R Reverse Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the bra
76. not equipped with seats and seat sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking belts the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front body and take the forces of a collision the best seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the your injuries in a collision much worse You webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around might suffer internal injuries or you could even your lap slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Latch Plate Latch Plate To Buckle
77. not start the engine 5 Press and hold the Unlock button on the key fob 6 After holding the Unlock button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the Lock and Unlock buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the Unlock button on the fob 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or mod
78. operating mode for ESP in 4WD high range and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD low range or neutral back to 4WD high range the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP Control Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP Off 4W
79. or down to reach Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could the position that serves you best reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt collision This device improves the performance of the 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver or front passenger seat belt has not been bu
80. or lug gage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmen tal rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION WARNING e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur unless side curtains are also removed Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are de signed only for protection against the element
81. other booster source that has a greater than 12 volt system i e Do not use a 24 volt power source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the automatic transmission in P Park or the manual transmission in N Neutral and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by push ing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because t
82. properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move Do not allow people to ride in any area of your freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli vehicle that is
83. ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push downward on the handle to lower the seat 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Recline Lever 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position Seat Height Adjustment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat 2 Door Models Head Restraints Push the lever on the seatback rearward toward the rear Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in of the vehicle to tilt the entire seat forward the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head T restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The front head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button The rear head restraints are not adjustable Easy Entry Lever 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 2 Door Models NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold seatback for ward Rear Seat Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
84. rear or side curtains tal rain snow etc e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty Grit may scratch the window Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Mod els in Section 7 of this manual It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up unless side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the vehicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are de signed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts Folding Down The Soft Top NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 etc clean them with a mild soap solu
85. rejses 393 OUDEICGE cs aa ee ae ke ek ae dea ae a 163 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 46 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 271 Swing Gate Rear er occa ere e r9 ers 34 System Navigation llle 231 Tachometer 4 24 cide krya i ERR GRE ER 192 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 193 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 68 Theft System Arming 00000005 19 Theft System Disarming llle 19 Tilt Steering Column 000005 101 Tip Start i i s eet ee 252 Tire and Loading Information Placard 289 290 Tire Identification Number TIN 288 Tire Markings eie eed ea 284 Tire Safety Information 6 284 Eli P 293 431 AirPress tfe 2 2 lie ees 294 Alignment and Balance 000 300 Chains xe mmm a Be aot RR e Changing ues koc co be hak aware ale ge General Information 448 INDEX MM HighiSp ed uie ge eR RP EE a dor goes 296 Inflation Pressures 1 2 eee 294 Jacking xa vaed oie ea elds BOR P a XR 338 340 Load Capacity sess 289 290 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 302 Pressure Warning Light 194 Quality Grading 0004 431 Radial eges deme Dem er ia dasa eee 297 Replacement cise ha gas nde Gees bes 299 ROOM Pr 301 Safety iia re E x x E de eS LESS 284 SIZES used eoe exe Us Oed es sr te Preces 285 Spare Tir i zei
86. switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window 4 door models and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window 4 door models The switches will continue to function for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a door is opened Power Window Switches Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The rear passenger window switches if equipped are located on the back of the center floor console Rear Power Window Switches 4 Door Window Lockout Switch 4 Door Models Only The window lockout switch located between the win dow switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on
87. that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended
88. the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including GATE GAS CAP NOFUSE or ESPOFF are present they will be 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle Front Door Removal If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur One chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a T50 Torx head driver If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 2 Unplug wiring harness connector under instrument To reinstall the door s perform the above steps in the panel opposite order Rear Door Removal 4 Door Models 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a amp T50 Torx head driver 3 Unhook door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow door to swing fully open as mirror may damage paint 4 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door 2 Slide front seat s fully forward 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Remove interior B pillar trim access door at botto
89. the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 31 Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer later in this section 32 Compass Mini Trip Computer Button If Equipped Press this button to switch between the different func tions 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF The compass trip computer when the appropriate con EQUIPPED ditions exist will show the following messages in the This feature located on the instrument cluster speedom odometer display eter and tachometer displays information on outside Ce Bip e Door Ajar door temperature compass direction and trip information jar e Swing Gate Ajar gATE e Loose Fuel Cap gASCAP e OD Fuse noFUSE ESP Off ESPOFF These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right button on the instrument cluster Control Buttons Press and release the left button on the instrument cluster to access the computer displays es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Press and hold the left button on the instrument cluster for 2 to 3 seconds to switch from English to Metric displays Reset Press and hold the right button on the instrument cluste
90. times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long en
91. tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light as long as the spare tire or any other road tire s are not below the low pressure warning threshold es STARTING AND OPERATING 305 CAUTION CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style NOTE After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure
92. tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressur
93. to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze not radiator anti freeze rated not to freeze at 25 F 31 C Operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer so
94. with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled firj maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine o
95. would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance es STARTING AND OPERATING 309 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance damage the emission control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle
96. 08 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 587 350 Ibs 159 kg Manual Model square meters kg 2WD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door X 7 539 Ibs 3 420 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1587 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Model square meters kg 2WD 3 8L 3 21 4 Door 5 204 lbs 2 360 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Manual Sahara square meters Model 2WD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door 7 704 lbs 3 494 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 587 350 Ibs 159 kg Manual Sahara square meters kg Model 2WD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door 7 729 lbs 3 506 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 587 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Sahara square meters kg Model 2WD en STARTING AND OPERATING 323 3 8L 3 21 4 Door X 5 225 Ibs 2 370 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Manual Model square meters AWD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door X 7 725 lbs 3 504 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1587 350 Ibs 159 kg Manual Model square meters kg 4WD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door X 7 750 lbs 3 515 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1587 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Model square meters kg 4WD 3 8L 3 21 4 Door 5 419 Ibs 2 458 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Manual Sahara square meters Model 4WD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door 7 919 lbs 3 592 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 587 350 Ibs 159 kg Manual Sahara square meters kg Model 4WD 324 STARTING AND OPERATING
97. 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu tral for recreational towing Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Shift automatic transmission into N Neutral or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 3 Shift transfer case lever into N Neutral 4 Start engine 5 Shift automatic transmission into D Drive or manual transmission into gear 6 Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicl
98. 34 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the edge of the side window top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch Ing 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove from the door frame and from 81925332 bodyside retainer Repeat this step on the other side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 10 Remove the bottom retainers of the sail panels from 11 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so the body side retainer at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top of the soft top NOTE It is helpful to pull down on the 3 bow 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 13 Completely release the latches from the loops on the unless the hard top is being installed To remove the windshield frame swing gate brackets pull the front side of clip forward and up to disengage from the bodyside retainer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 14 Grasp the side bow behind the header lift the top When the top is completely down position the drip rails and fo
99. 38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Natural LOCK UNLOCK use only a fuse having the correct amperage MTRS rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove Cartridge fuse 15 in the Power Distribution Center labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD e Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution Center location 11 labeled IOD Storage e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS IF EQUIPPED Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Light 658 Courtesy Lights Under Dash 1 906 Heater Control Lights 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Light Rear Window Defogger and Rear Wash Wipe 0 0 0 0 0c ee
100. 52 Fuel Requirements 0 306 397 Jump Staring os tasein a des er dns 342 Qil weston ed Bea Gachsea od es anir ales 354 397 Oil Disposal 5 5 eer ick ones Gee eons 357 Oil Filter sax chad eared x EARS 357 Oil Selecon ese rra kerane es 397 Overheating 0 0 i i rE 337 Star ng isco iG ease x a bx E EnD 251 Temperature Gauge or Da n iaa ri 193 Engine Oil Visc sity secsec errre Pisaee ede 357 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 357 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 60 Entry System Illuminated 20 Event Data Recorder lesse 61 Exhaust Gas Caution lllslesls 76 309 ExhaustSystem i2scsz m IRR Rr RE ss 366 Extender Seat Belt llle 46 Exterior Finish Care llle 380 Fabrice C re oem m xx 381 382 383 Fabric Tops is esent rue Yd 383 Filters AarCleaner i423 zsG ea es eR Y 361 Engine Fuel sewer MS ey 360 Engine OI che ys a eae pe UR eed hiis 357 Finish Care 222 4 ees nee eet eae deans 380 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 000 e eee 336 Tum Signal 20 05 29 thee Re 191 395 396 Flooded Engine Starting 252 Fluid Capacities cois ont 397 Fluid Level Checks 00000 c ee ueee 378 Automatic Transmission 374 Engine Oil agrees ie okie aware ale Bate 354 Manual Transmission 376 Power Steering ii ails VR RE Be 363 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts
101. ALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate SEEK SCAN te Ca RND MP3 WMA PUSH ON VOLUME PUSH AUDIO SELECT TUNE SCROLL RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode 8189f8f5 NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn the radio on Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn the radio off Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in ei
102. ANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Pres
103. Also a single chime will sound 10 High Beam Indicator Light This light shows that the headlights are on high 7 7 beam Pull the turn signal lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low If the driver s door is open and the headlights or parklights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will flash and a chime will sound 11 Brake Warning Light After ignition is turned on illuminates to indicate BRAKE function check at vehicle start up Indicates park ing brake is applied If the light stays on when the parking brake is off it indicates a possible brake system fluid leak or low pressure level see your authorized dealer immediately 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is in motion the red BRAKE warning light will flash and a chime will sound The operation of the BRAKE warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 12 Anti Lock ABS Warning Light S After ignition is turned on illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS
104. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Open 1 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cut out in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 4 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift 5 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the top the header on top of the rear portion of the deck 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds Ensure that the straps are securely stowed GE To Close Perform the above steps in the opposite order 7 Secure the top by using the two 2 provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 DOOR FRAME WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door frame removed as you lose the protection these structural elements can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Door Fram
105. D High Range Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP Control Switch for 5 seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running In this mode all ESP and TCS stability features are turned off except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section After 5 seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Refer to Compass and Mini Trip Computer If Equipped in Section 4 of this manual To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP system will change to Partial Off mode if the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h After the vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the P Park position from any position other than P Park and then moved out of the P Park position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ES
106. Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert driving e If equipped for and operated with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace your engine coolant anti freeze every 102 000 miles 164 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 406 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 14 000 19000 24 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped
107. E L AUTOMORILISTE POUR DE PLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS CONSULTEZ LE GUIDE DE L AUTOMOBILISTE POUR OBTENIR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES SACS GONFLABLES AUN CON SISTEMAS AVANZADOS A ADVERTENCIA DE BOLSA DE AIRE LA BOLSA DE AIRE PUEDE CAUSAR SERIOS DA OS O LA MUERTE A LOS NINOS EL ASIENTO DE ATRAS ES EL LUGAR MAS SEGURO PARA LOS NINOS PONGA UN ASIENTO DE NI O CON LA CARA HACIA ATRAS EN EL ASIENTO DELANTERO SIEMPRE USE LOS CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD Y SISTEMAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA NINOS PARA MAS INFORMACION SOBRE BOLSA DE AIRE CONSULTE EL MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO ALTO RIESGO DE ADVERTENCIA VoicAMIENTO EVITE MANIOBRAS ABRUPTAS Y VELOCIDAD EXCESIVA USE SIEMPRE EL CINTURON DE SEGURIDAD PARA MAYOR INFORMACION VER MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO LI 2250094 819128e1 Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION E million annually In a roll over crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seal belt Always buckle up Although your vehicle may be equipped with a soft top or optional hard top to give the occupants protection from the weather these tops do not offer structural protection in
108. E viscosity grade num ber should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 7 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage i
109. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 2 Loosely attach rear of side bar to sport bar Refer to e Install top two 2 hex bolts 13mm first then lower Step 4 of Lowering Windshield and Removing Side side hex bolt 13mm Lower side bolt will not align Bars earlier in this section until top two bolts are installed 819292b7 e Reattach sport bar Velcro covering 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts 3 Attach front of side bar to windshield frame 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the 6 black REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the On position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the On or Off position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position 6 Reinstall wiper arms es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to
110. For personal security reasons and safety in an lock To lock a door when leaving your vehicle press to accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as the Lock position flush and close the door well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Door Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Power Door Locks If Equipped WARNING The door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch downward to lock the doors and e For personal security reasons and safety in an upward to unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instru ment panel center stack below the radio The top left
111. HE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANT FR 2 REAR 3 RGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG GR 2 TIRE REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRES P195 70R14 T125 70D15 a3 COLD Tli INFLATION PRE 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing see the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Info
112. HICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of antifreeze coolant other than the speci fied HOAT antifreeze coolant may result in de creased corrosion protection and engine damage If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolant Use of Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolant is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this ex tended maintenance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT antifreeze coolant When adding antifreeze coolant a minimum solution of 50 recommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if tempe
113. ING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries and push Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped gt II e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD or pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avai
114. INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Blower Control 81915188 Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position Temperature Control 81915192 NOTE Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Circulation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illu minate when you are in Re circulate mode Only use the Recirculate mode to tempo rarily block out any outside A s19160c4 Odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In co
115. ISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h spe
116. NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability RER combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes This radio has a hard drive CD s can be ripped to the hard drive and the map data comes loaded on the hard drive Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To manually set the clock change the time zone or change daylight savings information use a ball point pen or similar object to press the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio The Setup screen appears Setting the Clock 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object press 232 UNDERSTANDING
117. NING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running ESP BAS If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET This
118. P and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off highway or off road use only 4WD Low Range ESP Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD low range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD high range or neutral to 4WD low range the ESP system will be in this mode In 4WD low range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 48 km h At 40 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 40 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4WD low range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 48 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4WD low range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the P Park position from any position other than P Park and then moved out of the P Park position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WAR
119. Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If th
120. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cece cece hh hh nn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ce cece ccc ccc c eee hh hh nnn Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cece cece reer hh s hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 ce ccc ccc cee c eee c cere e cence i hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cece cece cece c eee hh REEERE EEEE 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 2 ccc ccc eee c cece eee e eee eee eee e teen hn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cee cece cece ccc ccc ceevcecevcecvees 10 INDEX 5 85 9 col arts os Sirs eine OE Me bos are V8 06 00 bine teres 6 lw Sine IE 9 8 0 Kx 8198 M09 6 0 one ete neces INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Mucovrour m 4 W Warnings And Cautions 9 Roll Over Warning 0000 5 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 9 Bl How To Use This Manual 7 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle Before you start to drive t
121. Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs 4 for 2 door models 6 for 4 door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Hard Top Hard Top Removal in this section 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the 4 screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip sport bar covers b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M c Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to reattach them to the metal pivot brackets s CAUTION d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 130 Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug screws if they are overtightened being careful n
122. TANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heater Only The controls for the heating ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions s us Manual Heater Control Mode Control The mode control left rotary knob allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor 4 2 ir is directed through the floor outlets and side p window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Qv Air is directed through the windshield
123. TING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate com puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se During off road use loss of traction can temporarily defeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi nate Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to rest
124. The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode 81915f2a Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost QU Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidi fies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
125. UTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Ij Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions e Do not all
126. X X X X X a SCHEDULE B 407 Miles 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 Kilometers 29 000 34 000 39 000 43000 48 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 408 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Miles 33 000 36 000 39 000 42 000 45 000 Kilometers 53 000 58 000 63 000 68 000 72000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X gt lt gt lt gt lt a SCHEDULE B 409
127. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M either the H button on the faceplate to change the hour or the M button on the faceplate to change the minute 2 The time setting will increase each time you press the button Holding either button in will fast forward the setting 3 If no changes are made within 5 seconds of accessing the Setup screen the screen will time out and you will be taken to the last mode NOTE To reset the clock select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER The clock will revert to the accurate time based on the time zone you selected Changing the Time Zone 1 Highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER 2 AT the Clock Setup screen highlight the box next to Time Zone and press ENTER 3 Highlight the appropriate time zone for you location and press ENTER to store your selection Select Done when finished NOTE When you are traveling and enter a new time zone the cluck must be reset manually for the new zone Changing Daylight Savings Time 1 Highlight the box next to Time and press ENTER 2 Select Daylight Savings when Daylight Savings Time is in effect or Select Standard if Daylight Savings Time is not being observed press ENTER 3 Select Done when finished Select Done to exit from the clock setting mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast t
128. a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON positi
129. ain m STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures iden saddovsusvesaseds 251 W Manual Transmission aoaaa aaaea aa Manual Transmission aaaea 251 6 Speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission s sssaaa saa 251 W Automatic Transmission Normal Starting teresi ristrett iiss 251 Shift Lock Manual Override Extreme Cold Weather Brake Transmission Interlock System 260 Belo lt A ORES eee herrea ae Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 261 If Engine Fails To Start 0 252 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation After Starting uc siot e DR as 253 Command Trac Or Rock Trac Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 254 It Equipped srs erse oi Se Rex 265 Operating Instructions Precautions 265 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Shift PositionS cessere ee e rex 267 Shifting Procedure 000050 268 Bi Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped 269 Bl Axle Lock Tru Lok Rubicon Models 270 H Rear Axle Lock 4WD Non Rubicon Models If Equipped ever IRR Ee x Re 271 ll Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect If Equipped soe oh ERREUR 27 Bl On Road Driving Tips 000 273 E Off Road Driving Tips 00 274 When To Use 4L Low Range 275 D
130. ake linings X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X required if belt was previously replaced Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X ne SCHEDULE B 411 Miles 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 126 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X required if belt was previously replaced Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Replace the spark plugs Replace the ignition cables Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 150 000 154000 159 000 164 000 169 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at
131. an get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 e After extended operation in mud sand water or PARKING BRAKE similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as possible When the parking brake is applied with the soon as possible ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull WARNING up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle might not have full braking po
132. and Swing Gate Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off by performing the following steps 1 Press the Lock button for 4 to 10 seconds 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 While the Lock button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off by performing the following steps 1 Press the Unlock button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the Unlock button is pressed a
133. and longer stopping distances An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector STARTING AND OPERATING 329 NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN mbes PINS PARK aie GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector 330 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LH LAMPS STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND pe I BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a tri
134. and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Blower Control Use this control center rotary knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control right rotary knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes
135. ation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside ve hicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon On hardtop models keep the tailgate window closed monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill when driving your vehicle On fabric top models do Never run the engine in a closed area such as a not drive with the rear window curtain up unless the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 side curtains are also open This will prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immed
136. authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned sta
137. axi mum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission to N Neutral or depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case N Neutral NOTE Pausing in transfer case N Neutral in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the auto matic transmission to N Neutral hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to desired mode NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being pro
138. cause you to lose control of your vehicle 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The axle lock switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls ee Axle Lock Switch This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate Once the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles push the top of the switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position es STARTING AND OPERATING 271 REAR AXLE LOCK 4WD NON RUBICON MODELS IF EQUIPPED The rear axle lock switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the switch down to lock the rear axle th
139. ccident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 e Safety chains must always be used between your 2 GTW vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the 3 GAWR frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized slack for turning corners This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade percentage of total trailer weight When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmissionin Towing Requirements Tires P Park With a manual transmission shift the trans mission into 1st gear And with four wheel drive ve hicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neu tral Always block or chock the trailer wheels Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on e Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ra
140. ced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning a
141. child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle o
142. ching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists NOTE In the event that the matching full size spare
143. ckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reacti vated if the driver or front passenger seat belt is unbuck led for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY RUN posi tion engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt at least three
144. completely forward Folding Rear Seat Rear Seat Release NOTE When lifting up on the release handle the seatback will release easier if you do not pull forward on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 To Raise the Rear Seat 1 Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt please make sure your seatback is fully latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open hood first release both hood latches 818f406e Hood Latch Next locate handle in middle of the front end of the hood Insert hand into gap between hood and top of grille and push handle to the side to raise hood You may 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME have to push down slightly on hood before pushing the handle Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood panel To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip
145. ction with the front airbag The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way e Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash T
146. ctions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching Removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provide UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into
147. d 274 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 274 OllEngHe 2see e 39e RESTER 354 Capacity cx exces Sees ER ee does dc caos 397 Dipstick eiseres rope res eme cine 354 Ig riiro MPO cR 357 Identification Logo isses 356 Materials Added to 000005 357 Pressure Warning Light 191 Recommendation 356 397 Viscosity 44 INDEX EE Oil Pressure Light ii cur RR Sg 191 Onboard Diagnostic System LL 351 352 Outside Rearview Mirrors 84 Overheating Engine os rucat iia a Caha S 337 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 430 PaintCare oss ios y RA 379 Paint Damage zxiiweeccces amp e ew Ee le RR d 379 Panic Alarm i sias e main 22 Parking Brake 0 0 ene 279 Passing Light ssn caicdag ab tacks RS P 98 PCV Valve zuswcez4eee ee whale REIR 360 Pef ii iue dal ra edad Bhan DA d eq Ge EA 75 Placard Tire and Loading Information 290 Polishing and Waxing 00000 380 Power Distribution Center Fuses 385 Door LOCKS uo ben etre dh des 31 Steering nedo ned tds aos eue ee oae 283 363 WindOWS scs eco decree eon eae n e eer BY 32 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 45 Preparation for Jacking 0 339 Pretensioners Seat Belts cscs es tee ee ee eee e e 43 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 23 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 0 0
148. d 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to a authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum total of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
149. d and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever under the multi function control lever and move the wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 818f547e Speed Control Switches To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRU
150. d Level Check Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake drums brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action Following off road usage completely inspect the under body of your vehicle Check tires body structure steer ing suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts Check air conditioning drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compartment for mud or debris and clean as required A plugged tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricat
151. d dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories system remains functional vehicles equipped with may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system power door locks will unlock automatically In addition for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the 3 pepe i You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or key is removed from the 1gnition switch or the vehicle is locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters driven Itis dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it ha
152. der latches be sure the drip retainers above the door opening are not trapped be tween the top and the door frame 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them 12 Tuck the sail panel retainers into the bodyside re by hooking the front edge on the body side retainer and tainer It may be necessary to pull down slightly at the rotate it downward until it snaps onto the rail Ensure top of the 4 bow to bring the retainers into place that the clips are properly located 11 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the 4 bow ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 13 To install the quarter window affix the upper rear 14 Tuck the front retainer into the door frame slot corner of the window temporarily to the Velcro Start Ensure that the retainer is fully rolled around and prop and zip the zipper only about 1 inch 2 5 cm At this time erly positioned into the door frame Failure to do so will it is necessary to tuck in the door frame retainer result in possible damage along with wind and water leaks 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 15 Continue zipping the window to the upper rear corner 17 If the sail panel is fully installed partially uninstall the sail panel near the swing gate opening so that the 16 Tuck the bottom retainer of the quarter window into zipper can be accessed the bottom
153. dicator drive will improve performance and extend transmission light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup second time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd 5 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Off Switch Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console The O D OFF indicator light on the switch will illuminate to show 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING CAUTION Never use P Park position with an automatic trans e Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you mission as a substitute for the parking brake Al must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering ways apply parking brake fully when parked to wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise guard against vehicle movement and possible injury damage to steering column or shifter could result or damage Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These prac t
154. ds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running serious personal injury smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold mm started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans Weather procedures should be repeated mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the After Starting engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 254 STARTING AND
155. e Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the switch up to unlock the rear axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or unlocked The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Sway Bar Switch 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Press the sway bar switch to activate the system Press WARNING the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or km h you may lose control of the vehicle which when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main driving conditions taining control of the vehicle The system monitors veh
156. e movement es STARTING AND OPERATING 333 7 Shut the engine off and place the ignition key into the unlocked OFF position 8 Shift automatic transmission into P Park 9 Apply parking brake 10 Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 11 Release parking brake CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into P Park with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the transfer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into P Park refer to steps 7 8 above Shifting Out Of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Shift automatic transmission into N Neutral or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 2 Shift transfer case lever into desired position 3 Shift automatic transmission into D Drive or release clutch on manual transmissions m NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral on automatic transmission equipped vehicles turning the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING CAUTION You or others could be injured if you leave the e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be Neutral position without first fully engaging the damaged parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position
157. e required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Excessive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 e Off road or desert driving Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your interval ihatoccars first engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual CAUTION NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace your engine coolant anti freeze every 102 000 miles 164 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully listed for Schedule B
158. e Removal 2 Door Models 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs 2 per side WARNING Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 81924c19 WARNING Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location frames outside of the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Door Frame Installation 2 Door Models 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the bodys ide hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews rubber seal at the top of the windshield 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and ti
159. e body compo nents and steering linkage more often than in nor mal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Salt in the air near sea coast localities a ee ne pce Oe d e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e Bird droppings CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve such as s
160. e floor Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in the N Neutral or P Park position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 5 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key briefly to START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running Ignition Key Positions Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 secon
161. e shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easi
162. e than 1 mile 2 km en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 feet 1 meter They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the DELAY position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Operation Move the lever upward to the second detent for LO speed wiper operation or to the third detent for HI speed operation Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is release
163. e tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tread Wear Indicators becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire i
164. ecurity Alarm Indicator Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the system you will need to press the Un lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or turn the ignition key to the RUN position If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm the system You may also acciden tally disarm the system by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will come on when you open any door The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 8163e6a8 Three Button Transmitter This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate or activate the panic alarm fr
165. ed Not re X quired if previously replaced Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not X done at 102 000 miles 164 000 km Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 422 SCHEDULE A MEE Miles 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 Kilometers 212 000 222 000 232 000 241 000 Months 132 138 144 150 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X essary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X X quired if previously replaced Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X Inspect the transfer case fluid add as necessary X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not X done at 120 000 miles 193 000 km Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle 0 000 seresa 426 Prepare For The Appointment 426 Prepare AList seen
166. ed Music Type name 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the
167. ed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 On steep hil
168. ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Latch Anchorages 4 Door Models Tether Strap Mounting 2 Door Models In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se B Tether Strap Mounting 4 Door Models Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the
169. ekeeping 5 Remove side bar assembly and reattach sport bar Velcro covering 6 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 7 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store in center console or securely behind the rear seat 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 8 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the 9 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the 6 black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 rubber hood bumpers Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 10 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 1 Raise the windshield ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
170. el If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Control Module e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner e Occupant Classification System OCS Front Pas senger Seat Only Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal or side collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering whe
171. el and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning a Light and PAD Indicator Light for 6 to 8 N seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD Indicator Light will function normally Refer to Pas senger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag in the unlikely event that a rear facing infant seat is in the front passenger seat NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD
172. emember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section Ee contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual 8 INTRODUCTION ee sj m Xi ESP om ep 7 ej BAS 3 S m ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE 58 wo l a X z b 3 e y AJ QU D BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE
173. en in 4L Low range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave ef fects Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5
174. ened Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multi function control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever to wards you to switch the headlights back to low beam 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multi function control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is in the multi function control lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multi function control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NOTE Atone will chime if the turn signals are left on for mor
175. ensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sen
176. equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment and Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Alignment will not correct this problem See your autho rized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Install chains on rear tires only Tire chains may be installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and excessive tire and chain wear e Use chains on P225 75R16 tires only P245 75R16 P255 75R17 P255 70R18 and LT255 75R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only e Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer e Follow tire chain manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains E STARTING AND OPERATING 301 e Install chains snugly and tighten a
177. er of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contain multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MPEG Specifi Sa
178. erheat ing Seek authorized service immediately if the gauge operates in the red zone In U S vehicles tempera ture is indicated in degrees fahrenheit in Canadian vehicles in degrees centigrade 19 Cruise Indicator Light cruise TMs light shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 20 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 22 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation press
179. es for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h es STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Radial Ply Tires Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not WARNING spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires WARNING on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may caus
180. es have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of offroad applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road usage the side step if equipped should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove two 2 nuts from bodyside 2 Remove one 1 bolt from underside of vehicle 3 Remove side step assembly When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift to 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to STARTING AND OPERATING 275 extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided wh
181. es on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 21 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated positions as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant
182. ess 313 BSCS Nee I EID aoc at sori d B cule Towing asesor e Rat cR PRODR 315 General Information lle 306 Common Towing Definitions sssse 315 Bl Fuel Requirements 00000008 306 Trailer Hitch Classification 319 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights ll Recreational Towing Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 320 Behind Motorhome Etc 00 332 Trailer And Tongue Weight 324 Shifting Into Neutral N 332 Towing Requirements ssri sracot aniier as 325 Shifting Out Of Neutral N aana aaau 333 TOWING NPS esetre sicie race bras 330 E STARTING AND OPERATING 251 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the gearshift control lever in N Neutral and depress the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to th
183. found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only eii to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location Tire Placard Location 4 Door Models Tire Placard Location 2 Door Models 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire and Loading Information Placard ya EN ae SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 T
184. fter 4 seconds press the Lock button Release both buttons 3 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the Lock button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the Lock button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE Whenentering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do
185. fter 6 mile 1 km of driving e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h e Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme driving maneuvers TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram Sree FRONT eso 6 80316864 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means
186. g Ree 63 Safety Checks You Should Make ll Engine Break In Recommendations 75 Inside The Vehicles se P nese aes ses Ep dd scs EP TCPT PC 76 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 2er uiis eR e ri Exhaust Gas eese 76 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by the dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Manual Transmission Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key c 80eS4edT 2 s g Ignition Key Positions Automatic Transmission If Equipped Place the shift lever in P Park Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key ous for a number of reasons A child or others could 2 be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Do not leave t
187. g up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No func
188. gainst operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on a stamped plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of vehicle through windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS E Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys Ignition Key Removal Key In Ignition Reminder H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel To Release The Steering Wheel Lock H Sentry Key Immobilizer System Important Note About Service Replacement Keys Customer Key Programming General Information ll Security Alarm System If Equipped To Set The Alarm
189. ge Cheese ERI E 339 SPINNING asado Quse b x E Kr ees OR as 297 Tread Wear Indicators 298 To Open Hood eet tfo et dor 93 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 324 Torque Converter Clutch sasssa saraa kisss 264 Tow Hooks Emergency esses 344 TOWING giaa hry ae eds ACER ow RE RR Oe 315 345 Disabled Vehicle 24r RE RES 345 Guide serrie dag Haake oS rede E 320 Recreational 2042 cig ssa Re dex ees 332 Weight eode eek ues ea cde Se 320 Trae Lok Rear AXl leu RR RR 269 Traction Control csse n n n 106 Traction Control Light 06 196 Trailer TOWNE icu a ides Nie ee Yu 315 Cooling System Tips 0000 331 Hitches senares oad cea ERE pr EIS 306 319 Minimum Requirements 05 325 Trailer and Tongue Weight 324 lin 329 Trailer Towing Guide scoute eemist setes 320 Trailer Weight us a kas sensas ak aaa alas 320 Transfer Case x coe ede embed es 377 Four Wheel Drive Operation 265 Maintenance 4er bed ha dee eared ae 377 en INDEX 449 Transmission Automate 22 deed x X ey SET rues 261 Maintenance llle 374 376 Manali alias i au Boog eru rad ee 255 Range Indicator 00 00 0000 194 SINE is eats ote coh O3 CORREOS I e eS a 258 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry sasemet ta sas 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry llle 23 Transporting Pets 1 6
190. ghten both Door Frame Removal 4 Door Models knobs Repeat on the other side 1 Unscrew and remove the two 2 forward most door frame attachment knobs es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 WARNING Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the front door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your front hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame at 5 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the tachment knob on the rear door frame upper front of the rear door frame Pull the frame towards you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 6 Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for WARNING storage Store in a secure location e Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle Door Frame Installation 4 Door Models 1 Install the rear door frame first 81924c19 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 3
191. has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to stan dard non anti lock brakes If both the red BRAKE warning light and the amber ABS warning light are on see your dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual 13 Airbag Warning Light This indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 94 seconds when the ignition is first turned on If the light does not come on for 6 to 8 seconds stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped REAR Indicates when the rear axle lock has been a activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi mper tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 17 Sentry KeylSecurity Alarm Indicator Light If Equipped Refer to Sentry Key Immobilizer System or Vehicle Security Alarm in Section 2 of this manual 18 Coolant Temperature Gauge E Indicates engine coolant temperature The red zone to the far right indicates possible ov
192. having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle The rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing moun
193. he battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery mounted in the front and the rear CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a WARNING gency y tice stoned of road Do not vse tow hooks fr Any procedure other than above could result in tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 WARNING TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The manufacturer recommends towing with all four Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow wheels off the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised serious injury a
194. he keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock manual transmission only This lock pre vents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock CAUTION To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel 1 2 An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves revolution from straight ahead position turn off the Always remove the key from the ignition and lock engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended slightly in both directions until the lock engages move the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The Sentry Key Immobilizer System SKIM prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine down after 2 seconds of
195. his could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne par
196. his vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On Road Off Road Driving Tips in this manual WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Roll Over Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance higher center of gravity and narrower track than many passenger cars It is capable of perform ing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle
197. hould not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Jacking Instructions 1 Remove spare tire jack and tools from stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect jack handle driver to extension then to lug wrench 4 Operate jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged t FRONT JACKING LOCATION Jacking Locations 80295422 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position spare wheel tire on vehicle and install lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tighten nuts clockwise To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the
198. ht Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjusting Rearview Mirror 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Outside Mirrors WARNING To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight e Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Outside Rear View Mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 SEATS WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Move seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever Be sure the latch engages fully Manual Seat Adjustment 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Front Seat Back Recline The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by To recline using the
199. iately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a indicator check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the indicator is not lit during starting have it serviced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should feel the air directed against the windshield Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lights Fluid Leaks Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel while you work the controls Check turn signal and high coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes beam indicator lights on the instrument panel are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately
200. ices can overheat and damage the transmission When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween D Drive and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A es STARTING AND OPERATING 265 clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC OR ROCK TRAC IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions two rear wheel drive high range four wheel drive high range neutral and four wheel drive low range ee 4WD Shift Controls This transfer case is intended to be driven in the two wheel drive 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads In the events when additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to these positions The 4H and 4L p
201. icle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indi cator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4HI or 4LO refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section and press the stabilizer sway bar button to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 obtain the off road position The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the stabilizer sway bar button again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicl
202. ifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screw driver to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components 7 Separating Transmitter Halves 81182c72 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug DOORS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed
203. igh engine or road speeds in lower gears Engine damage may result When parking your vehicle always leave a manual transmission in first gear and apply the parking brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never use any gear as a substitute for the parking brake e Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal This causes heat buildup and damages the clutch e Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too high a speed for that gear Engine clutch or transmis sion damage may result e When you slow down or go up a grade downshift as speed requires or the engine may overheat CAUTION To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life of your manual transmission follow these tips e Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged e During cold weather you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms e Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse or ee up This is normal from reverse to a forward gear stop vehicle com pletely Otherwise transmission damage may result e Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting Otherwise transmission or clutch damage may result ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting betweena Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting forward gear and reverse do not spin wheels faster Speeds than 15 mph 24 km h or d
204. ights are on 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 U S Gallons 7 6L this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been FRONT activated 7 Seat Belt Indicator Light A warning chime and an indicator light will alert you to buckle the seat belts When the belt is buckled the chime will stop but the light will stay on until it times out about 6 seconds 8 Turn Signal Indicator Lights amp The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light dE Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on have the system checked by your autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 If the warning light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED
205. int Con trol ORC Module The ORC uses the occupant cat egory to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best intera
206. ion Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported es UNDERST
207. iption Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J11 30 Amp Sway Bar J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink THATCHAM Lock Pink Unlock Power Slid J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer ing Door Module Yellow J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module Yellow IOD Main Natural J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window M1 20 Amp Center High Mounted Green Defogger Yellow Stop Light CHMSL J15 30 Amp Rear Blower Brake Switch Pink M2 20Amp Trailer Lighting J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Yellow Green M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Lockers J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Yellow Yellow Module PCM Trans MA 10Amp Trailer Tow Range Red J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan M5 25 Amp Inverter Yellow Natural 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M SENSR Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP Yellow Sensor Green M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow BATT ACC SELECT Yellow Cabin Compartment M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Node IOD CCN Yellow Wireless Control Module WCM SI M9 ee Rear Heated Seat REN Clock Module me CLK MOD Multi M10 20 Amp Satellite Digital Audio Function Control Yellow Receiver SDARS Switch MULTIFCTN RADIO Antenna SW ANT Vanity Lam 7 E ye LP P M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export s Yellow Only M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw Red IOD HVAC MW
208. is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle and serious injury or death Because of its open body construction your vehicle offers less protection than closed vehicles in the event of an accident A WARNING A WARNING AVOID ABRUPT MANEUVERS AND EXCESSIVE SPEED ALWAYS BUCKLE UP SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION PLUS GRAND RISQUE MISE EN GARDE PLUSSRAND RIS EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS HIGHER ROLLOVER CHILDREN CAN BE KILLED OR SERIOUSLY INJURED BY THE AIR BAG THE BACK SEAT IS THE SAFEST PLACE FOR CHILDREN NEVER PUT A REAR FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT ALWAYS USE SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT AIR BAGS MEME AVEC DES SACS _ GONFLABLES PERFECTIONNES A MISE EN GARDE LES ENFANTS PEUVENT ETRE TUES OU GRAVEMENT BLESSES PAR UN SAC GONFLABLE LA BANQUETTE ARRIERE EST LA PLACE LA PLUS SECURITAIRE FOUR LES ENFANTS VITER LES MANOELIVRES ABRUPTES NE JAMAIS PLACER UN SIEGE POUR ENFANT ORIENT VERS L ARRI RE L AVANT ET LA VITESSE EXCESSIVE fie DU V HICULE PORTER TOUJOURS LES CEINTURES DE S CURIT UfILISEL TOUJOURS LA CEINTURE DE S CURIT T LE SYST ME DE RETENUE POUR CONSULTER LE GUIDE D
209. issssssssss ees 102 FAERIE ela erates OAT Soe one a ii To Set At A Desired Speed 00 00 103 Pasme THEME iait lm dva RU epi ird di To Deactivate een a eee es 103 a e SS HE EQUIBDEGU v adde ye ncr s To Resume Speed x t d 103 Turn Signals s viec e Rb Ce Res 98 To Vary The Speed Setting 103 Dayums Running Might TE EGHIDPEO did me Manual Transmission sss 104 ma yace PAPER ng MARNE piei aa di To Accelerate For Passing 104 A AE E dence dais i ll Electronic Brake Control System 105 Windshield Wiper Operation 100 ABS Anu Tock Brake System 5 jocceschb 105 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 TCS Traction Control System 106 Installing The Soft Top 120 BAS Brake Assist System 106 W Freedom Top 3 Piece Modular Hard Top 123 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 107 Front Panel s Removal 5 ESP Electronic Stability Program 108 Front Panel s Installation ESP BAS Warning Lamp 113 Rear Panel Removal Wi Electrical Power Outlet 000 0 114 Rear Panel Installation gt seres circe sea 129 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 115 W Soft Top 2 Door Models 130 BC up Get
210. ith the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident
211. ize on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally
212. k the original locations prior to removing securely fastened either up or down Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Fail ure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Remove the 2 top hex bolts 13mm and the 1 side hex bolt 13mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 819292b7 3 Open sport bar Velcro covering 4 Remove 1 hex bolt 13mm visible through the plastic trim on bottom side of side bar 1 hex bolt 13mm on the side of the side bar and 1 hex bolt 13mm on top of the side bar NOTE Pull side bar out horizontally when removing es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 CAUTION Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for saf
213. ke pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual Overdrive OID For most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled Overdrive and will automatically shift from D Drive to O D Overdrive if the following conditions are present e The transmission selector is in D Drive e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over that the switch has been activated When the in
214. kes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in R Reverse gear Never back down a hill in N Neutral using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4L Low range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you c
215. ks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it
216. l it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode ear lier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child
217. lable on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if it is supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn TUNE control knob to adjust the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control
218. ld or damp weather the use of the Recirculate mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE The Recirculate mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Operation Press this button to engage the air conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the air conditioning system is en gaged 4 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds 819160ac 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticki
219. ld toward the rear of the vehicle so they make a v shape this prevents damage to the soft top material 15 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Putting Up The Soft Top 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 3 Before attaching the header latches be sure the drip retainers above the door opening are not trapped be tween the top and the door frame 4 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 5 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them 6 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail by hooking the front edge on the body side retainer and panels over the 3 bow rotate it downward until it snaps onto the rail Ensure that the clips are properly located 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Tuck the sail panel retainers into the bodyside retainer 8 To install the quarter window affix the upper rear It may be necessary to pull down slightly at the top of the corner of the window temporarily to the
220. ldren LATCH sees 68 70 Lubrication Body eee 364 Maintenance Free Battery 44 361 Maintenance Procedures lessen 354 Maintenance Schedule iles 402 Schedule A 22oss em m m 417 en INDEX 443 Schedule B es 405 Maintenance Schedules loeis 402 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine sis y RR YE d 195 352 Manual Service llle 430 Manual Transmission sss 255 376 Fluid Level Check 0 00000 08 376 Lubricant Selection 0000000 376 Shift Speeds 2 6 5 ecce ea eee ea 257 Master Cylinder Brakes 04 373 Mini Trip Computer 1 2 2 0 0 00000 198 MIOrS ziehe Qh Rao ur du wae up Bacay 83 Outside cipe FA ee E ERU iu BES A 84 R atviewW uscimannd mde x OE RERE E dox ele 83 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Modular Hard Top lsillllllseless 123 Monitor Tire Pressure System 302 Mopar Parts 2 ausser Rea eee 353 429 Multi Function Control Lever 96 Navigation Radio 0 0 cece eee 231 Navigation System sis ss sk e d ee che redo 231 New Vehicle Break In Period 75 Occupant Restraints s sissies syara anihan 36 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 306 Odometer 0 cee ees 195 197 THD 6a tavtiawvedina smt beer gate d 193 195 197 Off Pavement Driving Off Roa
221. le is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M cap until
222. ls a greater speed loss or gain and or more frequent downshifts auto transmission only may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
223. lt in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire properly inflated 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Economy Tire Inflation Pressures Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Placard Location 2 Door Models ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Tire Placard Location 4 Door Models The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial
224. lution 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean
225. ly attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seat back Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CH ildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems
226. m of B pillar 5 Unhook door strap from the body hook 6 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins 4 Unplug wiring harness connector from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the above steps in the opposite order en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including GATE GAS CAP NOFUSE or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur One chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors glove box swing gate and console storage 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE igs Manual Door Locks WARNING The front 2 Door Models and rear doors 4 Door Models are equipped with a rocker type interior door e
227. mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering m pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system 284 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE em DESCRIPTION OR p S MAXIMUM SIZE 4 DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY al STANDARDS bx TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 NOTE e P Passenger Me
228. mpling Fre Bit rate kbps cation quency KHz 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 SAAT G2 112 96 80 64 56 48 l 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 5 99 05 16 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 56 48 WMA Specifica tion WMA Sampling Fre quency kHz 44 1 and 48 Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will brin
229. n the ON or ACC position to operate the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed
230. nce the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE A
231. nd lower the top down into the vehicle bodyside retainer and Velcro back onto itself Ensure that the top is secure i819 19 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 20 Once the top is fully down use the straps used to secure the top in the Sunrider position Wrap the straps es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Putting Up The Soft Top NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 2 Open the swing gate 3 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Engage the slider feature of the knuckles into the door frame tracks and slide the top forward 6 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 81926dc3 5 Ensure that the top locks into Sunrider locking mecha nisms that are located above the front of the rear doors es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 7 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side bow until it rests on the windshield frame side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 8 Before attaching the hea
232. nd lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 SCHEDULE B BENE Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers 198 000 203 000 208 000 212 000 217 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X required if belt was previously replaced Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X nn SCHEDULE B 415 Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 222 000 227 000 232 000 237 000 241 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X re
233. nd the other end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 8L 350 Drive Belts Check Condition ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 351 And TENSION ss ceo eee dace oes 358 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 351 SPER EAE epee ts me nb giat iti ae Bl Emissions Inspection And Catalytic Converter 000000 Maintenance Programs 0005 352 Crankcase Emission Control System B Replacement Parts nnan esr en 353 Fuel Filter 4 0 eos CHR e red B Dealer Service qesoriersikeiikreee t RS 354 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ursus 361 Bl Maintenance Procedures 055 354 Maintenance Free Battery 361 Engine Oll i asd iy ass acy tudin ne or cia ege ds 354 Air Conditioner Maintenance 362 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Steering Fluid Check 363 Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication 364 Body Lubrication 0004 364 Windshield Wiper Blades 365 Windshield Washers sess 365 Exhaust System leessss 366 Cooling System crre sp llle 366 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 371 Brake System suceda Kerner ai hee 372 Automatic Transmission
234. nd wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 24 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so the correct mileage can be determined 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic t System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss stays on thr
235. ndicated in the appropriate Mainte nance Schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the mileage specified in the appropriate main tenance chart The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment for spark plug information Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be CA
236. ndom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME nmm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extens
237. near CAUTION the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indi cator light to turn on 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label c
238. nflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to
239. ng point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 42RLE NOTE If equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should
240. ng to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into N Neutral and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started ag
241. ngue Transmis Combined Wt Rat Gross Trailer Wt See Note sion ing Wt 1 3 8L 321 2 Door X 4 910 lbs 2 227 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Manual Model square meters 4WD 3 8L 410 2DoorX 4 910 Ibs 2 227 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Manual Model square meters 4WD 3 8L 4 10 2DoorX 5 935 Ibs 2 692 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Model square meters 4WD 3 8L 321 2 Door 5 101 lbs 2 314 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 1 000 lbs 453 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Manual Sahara square meters Model 4WD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 3 8L 4 10 2 Door 6 101 lbs 2 767 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Manual Sahara square meters Model 4WD 3 8L 4 10 2 Door 6 126 Ibs 2 779 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Sahara square meters Model 4WD 3 8L 4 10 2 Door 6 254 Ibs 2 837 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Manual Rubicon square meters Model 4WD 3 8L 4 10 2 Door 6279 Ibs 2 848 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Rubicon square meters Model 4WD 3 8L 321 4DoorX 5014 lbs 2 274 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Manual Model square meters 2WD 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 8L 410 4 Door X 7 514 lbs 3 4
242. not be tampered with Your autho rized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 mi 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower hol
243. nt an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Compass Calibration The Automatic Compass Calibration feature eliminates the need for the operator intervention under normal conditions If the CAL indicator is lit the compass needs to be calibrated A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free of large metal objects such as large buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Automatic Compass Calibration The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions During a short initial period the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will appear blinking on the display After the vehicle has completed at least one complete circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects calibration will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 After initial calibration the compass will continue to automatically update this calibration whenever the ve hicle is in motion Manual Compass Calibration NOTE Before attempting a manual compass calibra tion the engine must be running and the transmission in the P Park position if equipped Compass calibration can also be requested To manually calibrate the compass you must first enter the variance mode Press the and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds t
244. ntrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 434 INDEX ME ABS Anti Lock Brake System 192 281 Adding Fuel 22 e RR les 310 Adding Washer Fluid 04 183 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 361 Air Conditioner Maintenance 362 Air Conditioning llle 240 243 Air Conditioning Controls 243 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 244 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 363 Air Conditioning System 040 243 Air Filter cio cha gence wade eS nea da ae teed 361 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 200000 cee eee nee 294 Adtbag ees ES eh RE ERG RP dE 46 Airbag Deployment llle 58 Airbag Light 422262222 9 Rb e end 61
245. nts you from moving the gear shift out of P Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of P Park en STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Automatic Transmission with Overdrive Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Automatic Shift Controls Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P Park or N Neutral position into another gear range P Park This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the selector in P Park position WARNING Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the bra
246. nued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer strongly supports the use of reformu lated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle
247. nufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions 432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under co
248. nytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the s
249. o coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when changing your subscription 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RSC Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID
250. o enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed Once in the variance mode it is necessary to release the button and then press and hold it again approximately 10 seconds until CAL is displayed solid not blinking Manual compass calibration has been initiated Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL symbol is extinguished When the CAL symbol no longer is displayed the compass is calibrated and should display correct head ings Verify proper calibration by checking North N South S East E and West W If the compass does not appear accurate repeat the calibration procedure in an other area Compass Variance Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North For proper compass function the correct variance zone must be set Setting the Compass Variance Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari ance zone To check the variance zone the ignition must be on Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed To change the zone press the left button once to increment the zone The default is Zone 8 After Zone
251. odyside retainer Repeat this step on the other side 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 10 Remove the bottom retainers of the sail panels from 11 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft the body side retainer at the rear corners of the vehicle top NOTE It is helpful to pull down on the 4 bow ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 13 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift unless the hard top is being installed To remove the the top swing gate brackets pull the front side of clip forward and up to disengage from the bodyside retainer 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 14 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 15 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form the header on top of the rear portion of the deck a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 16 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 17 Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to the door frame track to the rear door frame disengage Repeat this step on the other side M 81926dc3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 18 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track around the side bows and through the slot on the a
252. om distances a maximum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the Unlock button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the Unlock button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first Unlock button press by using the follow ing procedure 1 Press and hold the Lock button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the Lock button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the Unlock button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the Lock Unlock button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the Lock button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors
253. on but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
254. ontains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire s
255. or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated w
256. ore e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu Anti Lock Brake System function ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be WARNING yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish The ABS cannot prevent accidents including their effectiveness and may lead to an accident those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others en STARTING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide
257. orized when the thermostat opens allowing hot antifreeze coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check antifreeze coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 coolant needs to be added contents of coolant recov ery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain antifreeze coolant concentration at 50 HOAT antifreeze coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and n
258. ositions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together This light illuminates when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshafts speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times four times for Rubicon mod els that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit es STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING 4H Position Four Wheel Drive High Range Locks
259. ot to cross thread the screws or over tighten ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 5 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 6 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window located in the soft top and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the right rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up the Soft Top in this section FREEDOM TOP 3 PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP CAUTION e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build ing hunting or camping supplies and or lug gage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmen tal rain snow etc 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move to the side 2 Turn center dials 2 from center of roof panel es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 3 T
260. ough several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the Malfunction Indicator Light may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 26 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash any time the ESP or TCS is active and helping to improve vehicle stability If the ESP TCS Indicator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 27 OID Overdrive Off Indicator Light D p This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected The O D OFF button is located on the gear shift lever 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the front sway red bar is disconnected 29 Electronic
261. ough this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Small Objects OF PER Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occu pant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight s
262. ough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and stow the seat belt extender when not needed Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 81816807 Front Airbag Components This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are located inside the driver and front passenger seats and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Side Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se
263. oulder belt is equipped with a the 60 rear seat back is not fully latched This prevents lock out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt the fully upright and locked position when occu when the rear seat back is not fully latched pied If the rear seat back is not fully upright and NOTE locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should imme diately be taken to your dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal e If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear injury center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seat back is fully latched en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage WARNING In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder your outside shoulder and slide it up
264. ow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mounted in the fuel tank may be necessary ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule B WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compart ment before starting the vehicle wi
265. p practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals es STARTING AND OPERATING 331 NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips O D Off If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the O D OFF feature OFF when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph
266. p protect against personal injury passen gers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle e The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat 4 Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to it s mid track position Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Fold Down the Rear Seat the seatback only lift up on the release handle until the seatback disengages then fold the seat forward oS 1 Locate the seatback release handle on the outboard top side of each rear seatback lift up on the handle until the seatback releases Fold the seatback
267. perly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have an injury accident Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum trac tion WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and
268. quired if belt was previously replaced Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if X not done at 120 000 miles 193 000 km Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 SCHEDULE B ME Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts t Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trailer towing or fleet commercial service This maintenance is recommended by the manufac turer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty tOff highway operation trailer towing taxi limousine bus snow plowing or other types of commercial service or prolonged operation with heavy loading especially in hot weather require front and rear axle service indicated with a f in Schedule B Perform these services if the vehicle is usually operated under these conditions ee SCHEDULE A 417 Schedule A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Kilometers 10 000 19 000 29 000 39 000 48 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace X if necessary Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the manual transmission fluid add a
269. r while function is being displayed to reset The following trip conditions can be reset e AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy e ET Trip Conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Estimated Range DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This esti mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa tion Average Fuel Economy x Fuel Remaining This display cannot be reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to preve
270. r latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Tether Strap Mounting 2 Door Models Tether Strap Mounting 4 Door Models Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly inju
271. r vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines FULL RANGE MARK 80c0715e MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following to determine if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trip driving of less than 10 miles 16 2 km 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Taxi Police or deli
272. rake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Wl Emission Control System Maintenance 402 Schedule B 2 2 seesaw eee c e nce ees Bl Maintenance Schedules 0 0 402 Schedule A rios du eR Ue M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show th
273. ratures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water antifreeze coolant solu tion The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more frequent antifreeze coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of antifreeze coolant and to insure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add antifreeze coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant is a regu lated sub
274. rbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage e Airbag deployment level if applicable e Seat belt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold
275. red or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A new engine may consume some oil during its first few garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is considered as a normal part of the break in and not stopped in an open area with engine running for more interpreted as an indication of difficulty than a short period adjust the ventil
276. retainer beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish zipping the window and attach the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the other side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 18 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window with the bulky seal away from you 20 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window i 21 Finish installing the sail panels 19 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 22 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 24 Open the doors and tuck the plastic retainers into the swing gate brackets door frame slots above the door opening Start at the front and work toward the rear of the vehicle 81926539 23 Completely tuck the sail panel into the bodyside retainer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 25 Ensure plastic retainer is tucked in properly at B pillar not pinching seal 81926670 SUNRIDER 4 DOOR MODELS NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 26
277. rivetrain damage may To prevent clutch and transmission damage your vehicle result should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting fed mae COAATBRIOW Speeds Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift KM H speeds listed in the chart below a 6thto 5thto 4thto 3rd to 2nd to Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H tion 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st ca Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 Maxi 88 142 71 114 51 82 33 53 20 32 mum 3 8L Accel 15 24 24 34 47 56 Speed 39 55 76 90 Cruise 10 16 19 27 37 41 31 43 60 66 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Failure to follow the recommended downshifting CAUTION speeds may cause the engine to over speed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow depressed ing precautions are not observed e Shift into P Park only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of R Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from R Reverse P Park or N Neutral into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal
278. riving Through Water 0 275 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 276 Hill Climbing gt crrosess srsesssr sssri as 277 Traction Downhill After Driving Off Road ll Parking Brake E Anti Lock Brake System ll Power Steering H Tire Safety Information Tire Markings Tire Identification Number TIN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Bl Tires General Information TirePressure llle Tire Inflation Pressures Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation es STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Radial Ply Tires 297 Reformulated Gasoline 307 Tire SPINNING cric d ess povera eee ee 297 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 307 Tread Wear Indicators osos asiassa siriasi 298 MMT In Gasoline 00 000 308 LESON Wire yi asi ys ypt ain EEE NR E 298 Materials Added To Fuel 308 Replacement Tires llle 299 Fuel System Cautions llle Alignment And Balance 300 Carbon Monoxide Warnings B ue Chaits oodd edes sista paced Ne 4 S BP Adding Fuel ees eseci eee t H Tire Rotation Recommendations 301 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap s cese xe ene Wi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS BI Vehicle Loading 5 RE Par MA LE ia Certification Label oo 0isevaseseiae
279. rmation placard The es STARTING AND OPERATING 291 combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and si
280. roubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s ma
281. rting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean
282. running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle for longer than the 2 second validation time period The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Security Alarm System Indicator Light will come on for 3 seconds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a malfunction in the electronics If the bulb begins to flash immediately after the ignition switch is turned on this indicates that an invalid key is being used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut down after 2 seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition for that vehicle If the Security Alarm System Indicator Light comes on during normal vehicle operation it has been running for ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is no
283. ry for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the 2 boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs 4 for 2 door models 6 for 4 door models Right and left quarter windows e Rear window e Rear window roll up straps 2 e Sunrider secure straps 2 If Equipped e Rear swing gate brackets 2 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Hard Top Hard Top Removal in this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket 4 Using a rubber mallet carefully tap the knuckles from screws 2 per side using a T30 Torx head driver the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a 130 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Hard Top Hard Top Installation in this section Installing the
284. s Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Mod Folding Down The Salt Top els in Section 7 of this manual It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half doors carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Place finger up into the rear of the plastic retainer and pull down rolling the retainer out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 4 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the 6 Untuck the first three 3 inches of both sail panels loops on the windshield and pull the swing gate bar straight rearward out of the 7 swing gate brackets prior to unzipping the window 81925a2e 5 Open the swing gate 1
285. s Vehicle Weight Rating 315 GVWR 22633 toed i eritay CEPR 313 Hard TOP cgestauiyn i aan we rae repre oo 123 Hard Top Modular llle 123 Hard Top Removal l llleleesesse 126 Hazard Warning Flasher 336 Head R straint c ese morer eR x 87 Head Rests esas Grind Pid de nd HO 87 Headlights Bulb Replacement 004 394 Dimmer Switch eruta hie r iea e a S a 97 Replacing 00 cia acted ee eoe EX eee es 394 SWICK e aaa e esrb SOR andi e RS anda d 97 Heater 4226 b MES PY Ree ERE eas 238 Heater Engine Block 0005 254 High Beam Indicator 04 191 Hitches Trader TOWING Less6bxe 4e RI REDRR 9 ey Ea 319 Holder Cup iu ecc oer a LE Rr rei ad 115 Hood Release llle 93 Foss ug ERR Se GS XX ERG 371 372 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid s serron erases aiena 376 TEMON henep e aune sa Peas ao et ueque AEE 14 Key anrea An deh atti a a deae den d deat A 14 Ignition Key Removal lesse 14 Illuminated Entry srresireana teigi apaa 20 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 eee ee 63 Inflation Pressure Tires 0 0000005 294 Inside Rearview Mirror esses 83 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 00 e eee ee 189 Instrument Panel and Controls 188 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 383 Integrated Power Module Fuses 385 Interior Appearance Care 0005 382 Interior Lights s
286. s an airbag system E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in the event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event
287. s and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 SALES CODE RER AM FM CD DVD RADIO WITH
288. s antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified Ij DaimlerChrysler Dealership 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type NOTE Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication All driveline and steering components are sealed and do not require lubrication Driveshafts are not serviceable Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors tailgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents
289. s nec X essary Inspect the transfer case fluid add as necessary X Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 SCHEDULE A Se Miles 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000 Kilometers 58 000 68 000 77 000 87 000 Months 36 42 48 54 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Clean and lubricate soft top zippers if equipped X X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 en SCHEDULE A 419 M Miles 60 000 66 000 72 000 78 000 7 Kilometers 97000 106000 116000 126 000 M Months 60 66 72 78 N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X 4 Rotate the tires X X X X C Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X E essary S Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X C Inspect the brake linings X B Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed X D Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X U quired if belt was previously replaced E Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze Where X S both time and mileage are indicated follow the interval 8 which occurs first Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X Inspect transfer case fluid add as necessary X
290. s to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same select
291. se the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down Outside rear view mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars ee and ius these rae ee to kelp protect against 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following he instructi in thi Do not drive your vehicle on road with the wind the JRSUFUCHOUS UD NOHSHTDRIQIMAI shield down NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars omm Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is mar
292. sec eds aas neronen ia es 94 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 99 en INDEX 441 Introd ction scere teh eed eder 4 Jack Location ive Gane ha hee ee Ok ne 338 Jack Operation seem e RR dies 338 340 Jacking Instructions 000 340 Jump Starting tiea g hinne ee 342 Key Programming rucas ae dia a ie ae a as 18 Key Replacement 0 00 00 0c oA 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Key In Reminder 0 000 000 0000 15 Keyless Entry System 000000000 20 Keys xev kesni e Petia Ge Pete 14 Lane Change and Turn Signals 191 Lap Belts cai Sac oh xen aia eas Sa 37 Lap Shoulder Belts 000000 37 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 00 68 70 Lead Free Gasoline 4 seres rm obra 306 Lights 42249 Ime 9 eR RPER ES 94 Airbag sano ous dot eitis es eoe s ewes gpa 61 192 Ant boek ies eere e Re er ces 192 Anti Lock Warning 00 000 20 192 Back Up sio Debo ata one HRS nod tans 396 Brake Assist Warning 113 196 Brake Warning 26 a a a e eee 191 Bulb Replacement 0004 394 Carp i voce det ech sa yd e d bas Ge 95 Center Mounted Stop 2050 397 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 195 CIUIS v 534a it Bnd ace Ee a in PS Se 193 Daytime Running ss crese 00 0 6 e eee ee 99 Dimmer Switch Headlight 97 Electronic S
293. sors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restra
294. stance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M children do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills im mediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the antifreeze coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is not need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vap
295. stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429 WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer
296. t compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related Iransponder fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Also cell phones pagers or other RF electron ics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Important Note About Service A four digit PIN number is needed to service the Sentry Key Immobilizer System This number can be obtained from your authorized dealer However this number can also be found on your customer invoice that you were given upon receipt of your vehicle Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se consists of programming a blank
297. t may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in vere or fatal injury to the infant the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child deployment could cause severe injury or death to restraint infants in this position e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it All seating positions except for driver have a auto matic locking retractor identified by a distinctive label The seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip For the seat belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt unti
298. tability Program ESP Indicator lessen Electronic Throttle Control Warning Engine Temperature Warning 442 INDEX ME EOD epean oi eat AN dedistis ad ane mite 98 396 Hazard Warning Flasher 336 Headlight Switch 0 0 0 0 000 97 Headlights 2 5 oie ok oh cae ae ott eee thas 394 High Beam sucesos eese pac dex ee wars 191 High Beam Indicator 04 191 Instrument Cluster 0 000000 eee 97 l teriot weet nea BREA UR Pa oe ee dad 94 Lights On Reminder 0 0000000 97 Low Fuel 22212e eR ba Bd eas eas 190 LOW Tite sn ce eae dead Peewee nme Res 194 Oil Press r 6 esses eae ae eda Ge eas 191 Passing s aene tee wx EEL aR EE ERA 98 Rear Servicing ass sweats Kuna en e pn RR RR a 396 Rear Tanl ce se ime 234 404 288 PSA RE es 396 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 00020 191 Sentry Key cans ese ara e bs Ea es 193 SOEVICO sio scs dv aks BOR d Out Ap engen a fg ete 394 Oide Market 20e Ghee o Quen Gat ch Ste ee gt s 396 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 194 Traction Control 0 0 2 0 eee eee 196 Tuimi5ignal ss ERE s 98 191 395 396 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 190 Loading Vehicle 4 cee ese ea ee wpe ess 313 jc ctp PC 289 Locking Axle i n 270271 Locks DOOR see doth ex a sh eS wt ba a ge Ra OR 29 30 Power DOOF eaer besa asd ee EE eo 31 Steering Wheel seres sissa p RES S 15 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHi
299. ted lower attach ments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars x located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages 2 Door Models
300. teel wool or scouring powder which will hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild scratch metal and painted surfaces car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water Special Care e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your
301. teering wheel position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than WARNING appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the Natural laws n physics Hom acting on the the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS prevalling read conditions ESF cannot prevent acci Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease dents dading Mose xesulting fron Excesblye up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 3 available operating modes in 4WD High Range The system has 1 operating mode in 4WD Low Range 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2WD mode have 2 operating modes 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M High Range AWD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal
302. tethered CAUTION Make sure storage cap is installed to prevent foreign materials from entering tube and clogging system 8 Disconnect the wire harness from the hard top by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected from the hard top es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Rear Panel Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if E necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order NOTE The hard top must be positioned properly to SRI SER posu ensure sealing Also make sure that the hard top is sitting 9 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place on a soft flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that surface to prevent damage there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top 80a137af 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP 2 DOOR MODELS CAUTION e The soft top is not designed to carry any addi tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build ing hunting or camping supplies and
303. th accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces Front Cup Holders sory bracket from the plug DRUGS 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The rear passengers have cup holders at the rear of the STORAGE Center canscle Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock insert ignition key and turn To open press the latch and lift cover Rear Cup Holders Center Console es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Rear Storage Compartment The rear storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage com partment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on loop and twist 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in tray Rear Storage Cover 3 Open rear compartment cover 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the facto
304. th the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DARKENED INDICATOR WITH GREEN DOT BATTERY CHARGE OK FLUID LEVEL OK DARKENED INDICATOR NO GREEN DOT BATTERY CHARGE LOW BATTERY FLUID LEVEL OK CONDITION INDICATOR YELLOW OR BRIGHT INDICATOR BATTERY CHARGE UNKNOWN FLUID LEVEL LOW CHARGE MAY STILL BE SUFFICIENT TO START YOUR CAR To determine the battery charge check the battery test indicator if equipped on top of the battery Refer to the illustration CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and servi
305. that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the ai
306. the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at If the swing gate flip up window is open or the swing gate is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the swing gate flip up window or the swing gate is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and then to ON to restart the rear wiper NOTE The rear swing gate will lock while the rear wiper is operating The gate will stay locked until the wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked by key lock switch or key fob Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind CAUTION shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual Use care when washing the inside of the rear win water dow to prevent damage to heating elements Use a Rear Window Defroster If Equipped soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping The push button is located on parallel to the heating elements Also keep all the bottom right side of the objects a safe distance from the window to prevent blower control knob
307. the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the WARNING vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often e Improper installation can lead to failure of an have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing infant or child restraint It could come loose in a direction than infant carriers do so they can be used collision The child could be badly injured or rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of actly when installing an infant or child restraint child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front sea
308. the back of the center floor 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening REAR SWING GATE The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word gATE as an indica tion of when the swing gate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the swing gate is not completely closed the VF display will show the word gATE If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur if the rear swing gate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage The swing gate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on
309. the event of an accident and do not change the open body characteristic of the vehicle Even though your vehicle has a sport bar and side bars for some extra protection it is a truly open vehicle there is no structural integrated top and it has low sides and a folding wind shield Many of these vehicles do not have fully enclosed hard doors Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturn ing any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use standard seat belts subjects the driver and passengers to a greater risk of being thrown out of an open body vehicle than out of a closed vehicle in an accident which can result in injury or death This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings en INTRODUCTION 7 When it comes to service r
310. the front and rear You or others could be injured if you leave the driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose Neutral position without first fully engaging the slippery road surfaces parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position NOTE This range should not be used during dry pavement operation disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument am brake should always be applied when the driver is cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted not in the vehicle into the 4H position N Neutral Position Shift Positions Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Sec tion 5 of this manual For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and highway driving Dry hard surfaced roads 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4L Position Four Wheel Drive Low Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and m
311. the front doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To open the swing gate press the button on the gate CAUTION handle Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing swing gate as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are operating the vehicle 818f81ac Gate Handle NOTE Close flip up window before swing gate hard top models only 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side airbags if equipped for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system
312. the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C LOAD 3 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f9 REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be i
313. the zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experi enced work the Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam age the windows FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse J3 40 Amp Rear Door Module Green RR DOOR NODE J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node Natural J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Natural J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Green tem ABS Pump ESP J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Integrated Power Module TIPM Tink tem LA UE Eok J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Green Fuse Pues J9 40 Amp PZEV Motor Flex jl 40 Amp Power Folding Seat Green Fuel Green J10 30 Amp Manual Tuning J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pwr Pink Valve Hdlp Wash Pink Liftgate Module Relay ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Descr
314. ther AM or FM frequen cies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting SET CLOCK Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency
315. ticles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorize
316. tings are not exceeded 1 GVWR Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact m spare tire e GCWR must not be exceeded Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic Information section of this manual on Tread Wear brake controller is not required Indicators for ile proper miepection procedure Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for Ibs 907 kg proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits CAUHMON Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should h it brak d th Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or Nb dicia siue doi ura dii el vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort
317. tion 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode A No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc S
318. tion and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half doors carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cut out in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops 5 Open the swing gate eee 6 Untuck the first three 3 inches of both sail panels and pull the swing gate bar straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets prior to unzipping the window 81925a2e es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the edge of the side window top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch Ing 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove from the door frame and from 81925332 b
319. tric tire sizing is based on U S design tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design m standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Milimeters mm 65
320. ubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boili
321. ulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights 1 Remove the two 2 inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counter clockwise then remove it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer FLUID CAPACITIES 1 Remove the spare tire 2 Remove the four 4 screws holding the lens cover in place on the spare tire carrier 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2 Door Models 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel Approximate 4 Door Models 21 5 Gallons 79 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 8 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Engine Oil 6 Qts 5 7 Liters Cooling System 3 8 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 13 Qts 12 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
322. ure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle may be equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires a
323. urn rear dial located above shoulder belt anchorage 4 Turn rear fastener knob located on overhead speaker bar assembly 818efe37 84913300 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the windshield 6 Remove panel To remove right panel follow steps above except for step 2 Front Panel s Installation NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Panel Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Unbolt the two 2 Torx head screws which secure the hard top at the B pillar using a 40 Torx head driver 3 Open both doors es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 4 Unbolt the Torx head screws 4 for 2 door models 6 for 4 door models which secure the hard top to the vehicle using a 40 Torx head driver 5 Open swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass Lift rear window glass 81947a57 6 Locate the wiring harness at the rear left side corner of the vehicle 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M p the washer hose and install the
324. user s safety or the safety of others 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired O
325. ut in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for more information CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an a
326. vehicle has two auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Power Outlets ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUP HOLDERS In the center console there are two cup holders for the WARNING front seat passengers 7 NOTE The cup holder insert is removable from the e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not console for cleaning p in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started wi
327. very service commercial service e Trailer towing e Off road or desert driving e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown in schedule B of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Main tenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 8L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SA
328. ving a station that you wish to mode commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 trac
329. wer when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of P Park WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in P Park a manual transmission in R Reverse or 1st gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Pane Pa Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in the P Park position automatic transmission or R Reverse or Ist gear manual trans mission When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the gear shift lever in P E STAR
330. with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap 8191324e ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the market cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Indica fuel tankis tuli tor Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or
331. ylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the appropriate Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle r
332. ze of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 81ta4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can resu

2007 Jeep Wrangler

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents